Cargo Van
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Cargo Van
15MZZ-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE .................................109
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................277
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................429
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................531
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................565
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................621
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................629
10
INDEX .....................................................................639
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION ........................4
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............4
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............6
䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS ............6
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........6
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to
body modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
turer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains di-
mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
support. For service issues, contact your authorized
dealer.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
6 INTRODUCTION
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor-
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) .............12
▫ KeyFob.............................13
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition ..........14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................15
䡵 SENTRY KEY® .........................15
▫ Replacement Keys .....................16
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............17
▫ General Information ....................17
䡵
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .17
▫ Rearming Of The System .................18
▫ To Arm The System .....................18
▫ To Disarm The System ...................18
▫ Tamper Alert .........................19
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........19
䡵 ILLUMINATED APPROACH ...............20
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........20
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter ...............21
▫ Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If
Equipped ............................25
2
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters........27
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........27
▫ General Information ....................29
䡵
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .30
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................30
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped .....31
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode...............32
▫ To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start ......32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ..............................32
▫ Cancel Remote Start ....................33
▫ To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start
Mode ...............................33
▫ When To Reset Remote Start ..............34
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................34
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................34
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..........36
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ .................38
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................42
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped ........42
▫ Power Windows .......................42
䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR ....................47
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ......48
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock ......52
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................55
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............56
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........59
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............59
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................61
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........76
▫ Child Restraints .......................91
▫ Transporting Pets .....................101
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .102
䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................102
▫ Transporting Passengers .................102
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................103
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................104
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle .........................106
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACCESSORY
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the Key Fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi-
tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push
ignition button to place ignition in OFF position.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock your ve-
hicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
provides both audible and visible signals, for the first
three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light
will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For an
additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Rearming Of The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• Make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position. Insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
ILLUMINATED APPROACH
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on
the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position).
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate
horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to
the far left detent position).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be
turned off by using the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) controls (if NOT equipped with a touch-
screen radio) or the Uconnect® radio (if equipped with a
touchscreen radio). For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel.”
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button pushes from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
equipped from the factory with three-button RKE trans-
mitters, and those built with power options will be
equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.
Using The RKE Transmitter
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN-
LOCK, LOCK, and PANIC functions.
Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions
that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate
(optional), power sliding doors, and Remote Start feature
Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
(optional). Some features can be programmed to the
customers preferences. For example, lights flash, or
sound horn on lock.
Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to
unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the
Illuminated Entry system.
Remote Key Unlock On First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform-
ing the following steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Push and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, push and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by push-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans-
mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
the Key Fob removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Sound Horn With Remote Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Push the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10
seconds. Then, push the PANIC button while still
holding the LOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by push-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pushing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
• When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pushing the
PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)
noises of the system.
• The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is
running.
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Push the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If
the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead
console.
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, using the RKE transmitter to open the power
liftgate does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Push the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pushing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve-
hicle Security Alarm.
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Push the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pushing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — If
Equipped
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Push and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, push and hold the LOCK
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by Push-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans-
mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
the Key Fob removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Inserting Key Into Transmitter Case Slot
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Separating Transmitter Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in Off position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minute
cycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition
switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is
unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch, and turn it to the ON/RUN
position. Otherwise, the engine will shut off at the end of
15-minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the
switch to the ON/RUN position.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
• The message “Remote Start Active — Key To Run” will
display in the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to
ON/RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) in ⬙Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
• Any engine warning lights come on.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute
cycle.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start
Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button 1 time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote
Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds
after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
When To Reset Remote Start
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start-
ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
button was pushed, the vehicle must be reset. Insert the
Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to
the ON/RUN position.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs
on each door trim panel.
If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Sliding Door Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you push the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you push the power door lock switch while the sliding
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
door locks (lock or unlock).
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors Automatically at
15 mph (24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On
Exit features in accordance with local laws.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for an
extended period of time, the Passive Entry feature for
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
Entry feature.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door
handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will
automatically lock after 60 seconds.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the vehicles door’s automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: All doors will remain locked when the liftgate
release handle is pushed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
•
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s
door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent
windows from the driver’s seat.
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar switch just below the power window
switches.
Driver’s Power Window Switches
Power Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
The front window switches may be equipped with an
Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to 10
minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) after
the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening a
vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The front driver and front passenger switches may be
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single switch on the door handle
assembly.
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-
lowing guidelines:
• Always open the door smoothly.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open-
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
the downhill direction.
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
The power sliding door may be opened or
closed manually or by using the buttons on the
RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or
rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside
power sliding door handle will also power open or close
the power sliding door.
NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
closed manually.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Push the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pushing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console
for the driver and passengers. Pushing the switch once
will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pushed
while the door is under a power cycle, the door will
reverse direction.
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled and will go into manual
mode.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
Power Sliding Door Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to
disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen-
gers.
NOTE:
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the
power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and
vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be
pushed.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
door switch is pushed. To close the door, wait until it
is fully open and then push the switch again.
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a
clicking sound until the door has no further move-
ment. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling
the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs,
no damage is done to the power sliding door motor.
The power sliding door must be opened or closed
manually.
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12
seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
entering or exiting the vehicle.
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or
disabled by performing the following procedure:
1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five
times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, push the HAZ-
ARD switch ON.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
Power Sliding Side Door Power Switch
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
and handles may be overridden by pushing the OFF side
of the Power Switch located in the front overhead con-
sole.
When the power sliding door power switch is in the OFF
position, the power sliding side door may not be opened
or closed by pushing the switch located on the B-pillar
trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or activating
the inside power sliding door handle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Power Switch
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Power Switch
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always
test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the
desired position.
• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en-
gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
• The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front
of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child
Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unin-
tentional operation of the power sliding door from
the rear seats, push the “OFF” Master Lock Out
Switch located in the front overhead console, next to
the driver.
Child Protection Door Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the B-Pillar trim panel just in front of the power
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Pro-
tection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
equipped).
NOTE:
• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
overhead console, or the switches located on the
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding
door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the
child lock lever position.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate release handle
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. Push the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pushing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pushing the button located on the overhead console.
Overhead Console Master Power Switch
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Power Switch
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button,
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
When the RKE transmitter button is pushed and the
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash
and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
• During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open
or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several
times indicating power operation is in progress.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
be opened or closed manually.
• If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −12°F (−24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate buttons.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door and you could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Consumer Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in
the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5
MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
(Continued)
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING! (Continued)
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) – If Equipped
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating
positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Front Passenger Seat
• ALR= Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However, if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. You can recognize
when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the
fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step
three of the resetting procedure).
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
A — Downward Movement
B — Rearward Movement
C — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
Review Table Below
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
AHR In Reset Position
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) — If Equipped: Located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
— If Equipped
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction poten-
tial provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in
the “OFF” position.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING! (Continued)
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera-
tor and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resi-
dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
• www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Vehicles
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a
family vehicle and is not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat(s). Never install rearward-
facing child restraints in this vehicle. If you must carry a
child in a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger
seat should be moved to the full rearward position and
the child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight. Follow the instructions below to
secure the child restraint using the seat belt and tether
anchorage.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se-
cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger Air Bag. In a collision, a passenger Air Bag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
Front Passenger Seat
• ALR= Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
WARNING! (Continued)
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap anchorage
located behind the front passenger seatback, near the
floor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint,
always secure the top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether anchorage.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Front Passenger Seat Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ............................115
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped .....115
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .116
▫ Outside Mirrors ......................117
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped..........................117
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ..........117
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............118
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............119
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped................119
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped .......119
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .121
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED ........121
▫ Operation ..........................123
▫ Phone Call Features ...................131
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features ..............135
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............139
3
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone .....................141
▫ General Information ...................153
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED ........153
▫ Voice Command System Operation .........153
▫ Commands .........................155
▫ Voice Training .......................159
䡵 SEATS ..............................159
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............160
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped ............163
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ..............164
▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . .166
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped ......167
▫ Head Restraints ......................168
▫ Stow ’n Go® Seating — If Equipped ........172
▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped ...............179
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped ......183
▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped.....184
▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat —
If Equipped..........................185
▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped ...........................187
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks.........190
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .190
▫ Programming The Memory Feature .........191
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory .............192
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Memory Position Recall .................193
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
Seat Only)...........................193
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........195
䡵 LIGHTS .............................196
▫ Headlight Switch ......................196
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......197
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .197
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped ...........198
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................199
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....199
▫ Dimmer Controls .....................199
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................200
▫ Turn Signals .........................200
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................201
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................201
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................201
▫ Battery Protection .....................201
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ......202
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............203
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............203
▫ Windshield Washers....................203
▫ Mist Feature .........................203
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer.................204
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........204
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .206
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
䡵
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .207
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED ......208
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................210
▫ To Activate ..........................211
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................211
▫ To Deactivate ........................212
▫ To Resume Speed .....................212
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............212
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................213
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................214
▫ ParkSense® Sensors ....................215
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display .............215
▫ ParkSense® Display ....................216
▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense® ...........220
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System .............................220
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........221
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......221
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................223
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLES .................225
▫ Front Overhead Console.................225
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting ..............226
▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) .......226
▫
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped . .228
▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped .....228
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .229
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .231
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............231
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........234
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......235
▫ Using HomeLink® ....................236
▫ Security ............................236
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................237
▫ General Information....................238
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........238
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............239
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........239
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............239
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........239
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................239
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............240
▫ Sunshade Operation....................240
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................240
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................240
▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................241
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................241
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED.........245
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................247
▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders .............247
▫ Super Console — If Equipped.............248
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
▫ Premium Console Cupholders —
If Equipped..........................249
▫ Interior Bottle Holders ..................249
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped .......250
䡵 STORAGE ............................251
▫ Glove Compartments ..................251
▫ Door Trim Panel Storage ................252
▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped ......252
▫ Umbrella Holder .....................253
▫
Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped . .254
▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning...............255
▫ Coat Hooks .........................257
▫ Cargo Area Storage ....................257
䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES ...................258
▫ Basic Console ........................258
▫ Premium Console — If Equipped ..........259
▫ Super Console — If Equipped.............263
䡵 RAM CARGO VAN FEATURES ............265
▫ Ram Cargo Van Load Floor ..............265
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............267
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................267
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .268
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .268
▫ Deploying The Crossbars ................269
䡵 SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED ............274
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto-
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions
can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Power Mirror Controls
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile,”
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect® customer support:
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400.
Illuminated Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station. Uconnect® Phone operates no
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect® Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect® Phone
button and Voice Com-
mand button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you push the button you will
hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The
beep is your signal to give a command.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device,” the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth Device.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice com-
mand “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply push the Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for direc-
tions. Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a push of
the Phone
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone
pairing instructions:
1. Activate the Bluetooth® on your mobile phone.
2. Push the Phone
button to begin.
3. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing.”
4. When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifica-
tion Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter
into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit
PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the
initial pairing process.
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give
the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile phone.
Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a
unique phone name.
You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being the
highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones
to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time,
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your
Uconnect® System. The priority allows the Uconnect®
Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple
mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For
example, if priority three and priority five phones are
present in the vehicle, the Uconnect® Phone will use the
priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You
can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any
time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this
section).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Dial By Saying A Number
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.”
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook.”
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
• To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
by Saying a Name” section.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
To add names to the Uconnect® phonebook using Voice
Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
3. When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use
of long names helps the Voice Command and it is
recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or
“Robert” instead of “Bob.”
4. When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
5. When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic down-
loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit.”
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
feature.
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
To delete a Uconnect® phonebook entry using Voice
Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete.”
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, push the Voice Command
button
while the Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired
entry and say “Delete.”
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can-
not be deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
To delete, or erase ALL Uconnect® phonebook entries
using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
3. After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
NOTE:
• Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
To hear a list of ALL names in the Uconnect® phonebook
using Voice Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded
phonebook entries, if available.
3. To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice
Command
button during the playing of the
desired name, and say “Call.”
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
4. The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call.
• Push the Phone
button to accept the call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
• To reject the call, push and hold the Phone
button
until you hear a single beep, indicating that the
incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone.
• Push the Phone
button to place the current call on
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference
Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold:
1. Push the Phone
button until you hear a single
beep.
• This indicates that the call is on hold.
• To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a single beep.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
push the Phone
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold):
1. Push and hold the Phone
button until you hear a
double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command
button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under “Making a
Second Call While Current Call is in Progress.” After
the second call has established, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a double beep, indi-
cating that the two calls have been joined into one
conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress:
1. Momentarily push the Phone
button.
• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If
the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a
call on hold may not become active automatically.
This is cell phone-dependent.
2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a single beep.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Redial
To redial the last number called from your mobile phone
using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
3. An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
3. Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32 name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
button
and say “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• and have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance.”
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assis-
tance phone number using the Voice Command system.
To do this, push the Phone
button and say “Setup,”
followed by “Towing Assistance.” When prompted
say 1-800-521-2779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice
Command
button and say the sequence you wish to
enter, followed by the word “Send.” For example, if
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3
7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command
button
andsay,“3746#Send.” Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by “Send,” is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer
service center menu structure, and to leave a number
on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then push the Voice Command
button and
say “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The Uconnect® Phone will
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
then send the corresponding phone number associ-
ated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the
phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could push the Voice Command
button and say,
“Pair a Phone” to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
• “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
• “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect® Phone
paired mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone or vice
versa using Voice Command:
1. Push the Voice Command
button and say “Trans-
fer Call.”
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, push the Voice Command
but-
ton and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or
“Delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You can also push the Phone
button at any time
while the list is being played, and then choose the
phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft. [9 m]) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
To delete mobile phones paired with the Uconnect®
phone using Voice Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
3. At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
• You can also push the Phone
button at any time
while the list is being played, and choose the
phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
Phone
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
• From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode), push and hold the Voice Command
button for five seconds until the session begins,
or,
• Push the Voice Command
button and say the
“Voice Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice
Training” command.
You can either push the Uconnect® Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book en-
tries, and other settings in all language modes. The
System will prompt you before resetting to factory
settings.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command
For best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition
NOTE:
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
3. Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
3. You can either say the message you wish to send or
say “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, push the Voice Command
button
while the system is listing the message and say
“Send.” Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the
name or number of the person you wish to send the
message to.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L.
6. Why?
7. I love you.
8. Call me.
9. Call me later.
10. Thanks.
11. See you in 15 minutes.
12. I am on my way.
13. I’ll be late.
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now.
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call.
20. Start without me.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement ON/
OFF
Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement
OFF will stop the system from announcing the new
incoming messages.
To turn Voice Text Reply incoming announcement on or
off using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Incoming Message Announcement,” you will
then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Primary Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Primary Alternate (s)
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
Primary Alternate (s)
redial
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
satellite radio, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
When you push the Voice Command
button, you will
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a com-
mand.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists
options, push the Voice Command
button, listen for
the beep, and say your command.
Pushing the Voice Command
button while the sys-
tem is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning blower
is set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Com-
mand
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3.
Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
but-
ton. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
Streaming mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Disc Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Play” (to play the current track)
• “Pause” (to pause the current track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may push the Voice Command
but-
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
– “Save” (to save the memo)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may push the Voice Com-
mand
button to stop playing memos. You pro-
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
• “Change to setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Main menu setup”
• “Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep before
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Push the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to
the system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-
peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Seat Switch 2 — Seatback Switch
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
(Continued)
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed through the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located on the switch bank
below the climate controls.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HIGH to LOW, indicating the
change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after approximately 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats indepen-
dently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding
side door handle trim panels.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the
recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
Manual Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
(AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-
straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
If your vehicle is equipped with a second row bench seat,
the head restraints are not adjustable.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
Stow ’n Go® Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go® seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Second Row Stow ’n Go®
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go® seats, the seats
will fold and tumble in one motion.
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
Push Button
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the
armrests are raised.
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the
“LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin
latch to open the cover.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on
the outboard side of the seat.
The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold
automatically during the seat tumble. No additional
actuation is necessary.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy
storage.
6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
Automatic Folding Seatback
Tumbled Second Row Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
7. Close the storage bin cover.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
To Unstow Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat
anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
Seat In Storage Bin
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
mechanism to the “Unlocked” position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Stow ’n Go® Seat — Folded And Latched Position
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched
position: return the seatback and head restraint to the
upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner
lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest
and seatback and tumble seat forward.
1. Return the seatback to the upright position.
2. Return the head restraint to the upright position.
Raising The Seatback
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and
tumble seat forward.
Easy Entry Second Row
The second row Stow ’n Go® seats allow easy entry to the
third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
Raising The Head Restraint
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seat will automatically fold into position for easy
entry into the third row.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Quad Seats — If Equipped
Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjuster
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
Easy Entry
The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into
the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position,
lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of
the seat and lift the seat forward.
Fold-Flat Quad Seat
Easy Entry Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the
seatback and accessing the easy entry lever.
Removal
The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is
needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, push the
cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor
latches.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
Cross Beam For Seat Removal
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
removable for added cargo space.
Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and
moved on its Easy Out® Rollers.
Second Row Bench Seat
Release Handles
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions
on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate upward
until the lock indicator button returns into the handle.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstall-
ing these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open To Normal 3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat
2 — Stow 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both
Seats
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
and press the button again, for the desired position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the
head restraint down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side
of the head restraint.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the
seat to lower the seatback.
4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors.
Release Strap “2”
Release Strap “3”
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the
anchors latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
Release Strap “4”
Stowed Third Row Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Tailgate Mode
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals (if
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
equipped), and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be pro-
grammed to recall the same positions when the UN-
LOCK button is pressed.
Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of
the memory positions.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable
pedals [if equipped] and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
Driver Memory Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “RKE Linked To Memory” feature
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this
section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Press and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press MEMORY
button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, and
the pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
NOTE: Pressing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
memory mirror recall.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rear-
ward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal
to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when you
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
the LOCK position.
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled
or disabled through the programmable features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For further
information refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
panel, below the steering column.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the
safety catch downward while raising the hood at the
same time.
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
and the interior lights.
Hood Prop Rod
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF)
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
Headlight Switch With Halo Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer Program-
mable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
remain on. To change the timer setting, see your autho-
rized dealer.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
feature.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-
tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight
switch.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
The multifunction lever controls the:
• Turn Signals
• Headlight Beams Low/High
• Flash-To-Pass
• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Multifunction Lever
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to
alert the driver.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi-
function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
operation.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or
front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
position and the headlight switch in any position other
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Washer And Wiper Controls
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Windshield Washers
To use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the
second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers
will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent inter-
val previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the
wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward
the steering column) to the first detent and release for a
single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-
tent interval.
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the opera-
tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or
the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph
(0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above
freezing.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmis-
sion shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or
the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically shut-
ting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or
may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on
the center of the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
WARNING! (Continued)
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
The switch is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad-
justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sys-
tem Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-
Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instru-
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist System ON
Park Assist System OFF
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone Fast Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arcs None 3 Solid
(Continuous)
3 Slow
Flashing
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the radio volume, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled through the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC.
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-
TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense® will not operate.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after mak-
ing sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris, see your authorized dealer.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
ating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
•
When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the radio volume
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the EVIC.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
NOTE: The programmable features of the Parkview®
Rear Backup Camera can be selected through the touch-
screen. Refer to your “Uconnect® Supplement Manual”
for further information.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
(Continued)
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incan-
descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-
age and conversation mirror. The premium front overhead
console model features a LED focused light that illuminates
the instrument panel cupholders, two swiveling LED
lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversation mirror,
optional power sliding door switches and an optional
power liftgate switch.
NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
above except sunglass storage.
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (pre-
mium console only). This light is turned on when the
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only)
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, press the door latch to open the
compartment.
Over Door Latch
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by
rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing,
positioned for conversation mirror use.
NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the
door can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to
release.
Full Open Position
Conversation Mirror Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
Reading Lights
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/
Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
Overhead Compartment Features
1 — LCD Screen* 5 — Storage
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — LCD Screen*
3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
* If equipped, otherwise stor-
age.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the
lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The
driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition
switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected
directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
knob and element must be used.
Instrument Panel Outlets
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)
shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument
panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed
a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared
between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor
console outlet.
On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power
outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access
the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it
toward the instrument panel.
Removable Console Outlet
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con-
trolled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Super Console Outlets
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or with
Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with
Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet converts DC current
to AC current, and is located on the left rear trim panel
immediately behind the second row left passenger seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
The power inverter switch is located on the instrument
panel below the climate controls.
To turn on the power outlet, push the switch once. Push
the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play-
station®3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet,
the inverter should automatically reset. If the power
rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power in-
verter may have to be reset manually. To reset the
inverter manually push the power inverter button OFF
and ON. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the
power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the
inverter.
Power Inverter Outlet
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All
liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner
from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge
for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument
Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
Front Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention features.
Super Console — If Equipped
On models equipped with the Super Console, there are
two cupholders located in the center of the console.
For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the
pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.
Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the
cupholders.
Super Console Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped
On models equipped with premium center consoles,
there are four cupholders located on the top of the
console.
Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo-
dates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Premium Console Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-
modate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Interior Bottle Holder
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, press in on the button,
located on the left side of the upper door. The door will
automatically open.
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
Upper And Lower Glove Compartments
Upper Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Lower Glove Compartment
To open the lower compartment pull out on the release
handle.
NOTE: The lower compartment is equipped with a lock
that is part of the compartment handle.
Door Trim Panel Storage
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
Lower Compartment
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into
the left front door entry scuff molding.
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
Umbrella Holder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped
The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front of
the second row seats. The area below the covers can be
used for storage when the second row seat is in the
upright position.
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙Lock⬙ position
to allow greater access to the storage bin.
CAUTION!
NOTE: The storage bin cover must be locked and flat
to avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
Storage Bin
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha-
nism.
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed,4x8foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
CONSOLE FEATURES
There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and
Super.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
bin.
• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at
the console base.
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
3. Remove the console.
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
higher than the rear).
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
hook.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole
is centered on the winch hole.
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down-
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
cover plug.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Premium Console — If Equipped
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
bin offers multiple configurations.
• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean-
ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
cups or mugs with handles
• Top tray storage
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs
or other items
• Large console center storage will store headphones for
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other
items
• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics
• Rear occupant accessible
• Multiple adjustments
• Removable from vehicle for additional floor space
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
and a convenient storage tray.
Console Position 1
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large
storage area below.
Dual Storage Bins
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Console Position 2
Console Position 3
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
To Remove The Premium Floor Console
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
console.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
centimeters.
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console.
To Reinstall The Premium Floor Console:
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
higher than the front).
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket.
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket.
Console Position 4
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Super Console — If Equipped
The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front
lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin
and rear pull out drawer.
The super console contains a pass through storage area
accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing
down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front
tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door
slides rearward.
Front Lower Pass Through
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through
lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the
instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Located in the back of the super console is a storage
drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.
Super Console
1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
Rear Drawer Storage
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
RAM CARGO VAN FEATURES
Ram Cargo Van Load Floor
The Ram Cargo Van receives a structural aluminum rear
load floor. Two load floor options are available, the
standard floor with a flat aluminum surface and non skid
strips or an optional deluxe floor with a flat aluminum
surface and non skid strips, through-the-floor access to
three storage bins and four load floor tie downs.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
Standard Load Floor (Rear View)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Standard Load Floor Deluxe Load Floor Storage Bin Locations (Rear View)
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
Deluxe Load Floor Tie Down Locations (Rear View)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the
crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack
does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed the
maximum vehicle load capacity.
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or
stowed in the incorrect positions.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
Deploying The Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
Loosening Crossbars
Stowed Position
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in
any two of the three deploy positions.
Deployed Position
Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align
with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the
crossbars into the deployed positions.
Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
Tightening Crossbar
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stowing The Crossbars
Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars
are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once
the crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws
completely.
NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with rail tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplemen-
tary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops.
CAUTION!
• Check deployed crossbars frequently and retighten
thumb screws as necessary.
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(Continued)
Rail Tie Loops
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
CAUTION! (Continued)
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed.
•
The load should be secured and placed on top of the
crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to
place the load on the roof, place a blanket or other
protective layer between the load and the roof surface.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
Sun Screen Retracted Sun Screen Extended
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........282
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE ..........283
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM .......284
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....285
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED ..................299
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ............................301
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights ...............305
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights ..............305
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights ................306
▫ Oil Change Required ...................309
▫ Fuel Economy ........................310
▫ Vehicle Speed ........................312
▫ Trip Info ...........................312
▫ TirePSI.............................313
▫ Units ..............................313
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .313
▫ Messages # ..........................314
▫
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped . .314
4
▫ Compass / Temperature Display ..........315
▫ Turn Menu Off .......................317
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) .......................317
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — IF EQUIPPED ...................324
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped .................324
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped..........................324
䡵 Uconnect® 130 ........................325
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ......325
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ..................328
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............331
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .333
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO .....334
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode.......334
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play ................340
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............342
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play......345
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play .....345
▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .346
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped..........................351
䡵
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .351
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device .............................352
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Using This Feature.....................353
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons ...................353
▫ Play Mode ..........................353
▫ List Or Browse Mode ...................355
▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) .......357
䡵 Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................358
▫ Getting Started .......................358
▫ Blu-ray™ Disc Player ...................359
▫ Play Video Games .....................360
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1......363
▫ Dual Video Screen .....................365
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio . . .365
▫ Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player — If
Equipped ...........................368
▫ Play A Blu-ray™ Disc Using The Blu-ray™
Player — If Equipped ..................371
▫ Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
Playing .............................372
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System .............................375
▫ VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped .......376
▫ Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control — If
Equipped ...........................379
▫ Remote Control Storage .................380
▫ Locking The Remote Control .............381
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries......381
▫ Headphones Operation .................382
▫ Blu-ray™ Headphones Operation ..........383
▫ Controls ............................384
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries.........385
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty ...........................385
▫ System Information ....................386
▫ Shared Modes ........................386
▫ Information Mode Display ...............388
▫ Numeric Keypad Menu .................388
▫ Station List Menu .....................389
▫ Disc Menu ..........................390
▫ Display Settings.......................390
▫ Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . .391
▫ Disc Formats .........................391
▫ Display.............................397
▫ Product Agreement ....................401
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................405
▫ Radio Operation ......................406
▫ CD Player ...........................406
䡵 CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE . . . .406
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .407
▫ General Information ...................407
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................407
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
If Equipped .........................408
▫ Rear Manual Climate Control —
If Equipped .........................413
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ...........................415
▫ Operating Tips .......................426
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Vents 5 — Upper Glove Compartment 9 — Storage Bin 13 — Hood Release
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Lower Glove Compart-
ment
10 — Cup Holders 14 — Dimmer Switch
3 — Shift Lever 7 — Climate Controls 11 — Switch Bank 15 — Headlight Switch
4 — Radio 8 — DVD – If Equipped 12 — Ignition Switch
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a continuous chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signal off. If either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
5. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for-
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
6. Odometer Display/Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odom-
eter display shows the total distance the vehicle has been
driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or
L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to
Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering
wheel) to access or reset the display.
Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door .............................Door Ajar
gATE ..........................Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE ....................LowTirePressure
gASCAP ......................Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ..............OilChange Required
LoCOOL .......................LowCoolant
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area
located in the instrument cluster.
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped” in this section for further information.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the
STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations, refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle.”
CHAngE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle-based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the
following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features
a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in this section.
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
12. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
13. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
14. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
16. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE:
• You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
• The highest available transmission gear is displayed
in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/-
selector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to
“Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
18. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
20. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
21. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L), this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
22. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an au-
thorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
23. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is
allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
26. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
During sustained high speed driving or trailer
towing up long grades on hot days, the auto-
matic transmission oil may become too hot.
When the transmission overheat warning light
turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle perfor-
mance until the automatic transmission cools down.
Once the transmission has cooled down and the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally. If the high
speed is maintained, the overheating will continue to
occur.
If the overheating continues, it may become necessary to
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
• Tire PSI
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
• System Setup (Personal Settings)
• Turn Menu Off
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• UP Button
Push and release the UP button to scroll up-
ward through the main menu items (Fuel
Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Mes-
sages, Units, System Setup).
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• DOWN Button
Push and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menu items.
• RIGHT Button
The RIGHT/SELECT button allows access to
information in EVIC submenus, selects some
feature settings, and resets some EVIC features.
The EVIC prompts the driver when the RIGHT
button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
Once the RIGHT button has been selected for
the desired submenu list, follow the EVIC
prompts to properly select the desired sub-
menu EVIC features.
• BACK Button
Push and release the BACK button to scroll
back to a previous menu or sub-menu.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
1. The top line where compass direction and outside
temperature are displayed.
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom-
eter line.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure.⬙
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.⬙
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex-
amples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Un-
available - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On.⬙
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
• Key in ignition
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
• Remote start active — Key to Run
• Wrong Key
• Damaged Key
• Key not programmed
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key Left Vehicle
• Key Not Detected
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
• Low Tire Pressure
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System” in “Starting And Operating”)
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
• Turn Signal On
• RKE Battery Low
• Service Keyless System
• Low Washer Fluid
• Oil Change Required
• Check Gascap
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Park Assist Disabled
• Service Park Assist System
• Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park
• Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed
when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind
Spot System has been turned off.
• Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block-
age, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ con-
ditions. When this message is displayed, both outside
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic inter-
ference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the
icon only on the side of interference as long as inter-
ference is present.
• Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis-
played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is permanently unavailable. The driver will
receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn-
ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If
this message is present, see an authorized dealer.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
• Electronic Range Select (ERS) Status
The shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating
the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged
and the gear selected is displayed. For further informa-
tion on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating.”
• Electronic Speed Control Ready
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ready. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L), this light will turn on and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Loose Gascap Indicator
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will
display in the telltale display area. Tighten the fuel filler
cap properly.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
If the message continues to appear for more than three
days after tightening the gas cap, have the vehicle
serviced by an authorized service center immediately.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle
may require towing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate, and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
display in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, push and release the MENU but-
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the
SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy functions
display in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy (AVG)
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG or L/100 km)
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the
prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button. When the
fuel economy is reset, the display will read “zero” for two
seconds. Then, the history information will be erased,
and the averaging will continue from the last fuel aver-
age reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT arrow
button.
Average Fuel Economy Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Vehicle Speed
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the
RIGHT arrow button. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button to display the current speed in mph or km/h.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button a second time will
toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC.
Trip Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and push the SELECT
button. Push and release the UP/DOWN buttons to
highlight one of the following functions if you want to
reset it:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
selected (highlighted). Push and hold the SELECT button
to clear the resettable function being displayed.
Tire PSI
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release
the SELECT button to view a graphic of the vehicle with
a tire pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
Units
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then push
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC. Then, push and release the
SELECT button. Push and release the UP and DOWN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
button to scroll through the available information dis-
plays, then push and release SELECT to display any one
of the following choices.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake
status indicator.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Messages #
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
sages (in the # place holder). Pushing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Push
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
than one message to step through the remaining stored
messages. Pushing the BACK button takes you back to
the Main Menu.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed to
change ignition switch position, current ignition status
will be displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC
display to the right of the odometer value.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for more information.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display eight or fifteen compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or
more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal
or metallic objects). The compass will now function
normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button until the
System Setup (Customer-Programmable Features)
menu is reached, then push and release the SELECT
button.
3. Push and releasethe DOWN button until “Calibrate
Compass” is displayed in the EVIC then push and
release the SELECT button.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
4. Push and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Map
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the
SELECT button. The last variance zone number dis-
plays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
Turn Menu Off
Push and release RIGHT arrow button to turn the menu
off.
Customer-Programmable Features (System
Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE
NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System
Setup” from the main menu.
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙System
Setup⬙ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then
push and release the SELECT button to enter the System
Setup sub-menu. Push and release the UP or DOWN
button to select a feature form the following choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of three lan-
guages for all display screens, including the trip func-
tions and the navigation system (if equipped). Push and
release the UP or DOWN button while in this display and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
scroll through the language choices. Push and release the
SELECT button to select English, Spanish (Español), or
French (Français). Then, as you continue, the information
will display in the selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
utilizes voice commands, guiding you through the drive
route mile by mile, turn-by-turn, until the final destina-
tion is reached. To make your selection, push and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System — If
Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
Auto Lock Doors
When selected, all doors will lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make
your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow button
until a check-mark appears.
Auto Unlock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
opened. To make your selection, push and release the
Right arrow button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK but-
ton. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press, you
must push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to
unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors
On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on
the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
RKE Linked To Memory- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pushed. If
this feature is not selected, then the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the door mounted switch. To make your
selection, push and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is cycled to ON/RUN
position. To make your selection, push and release the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
RIGHT arrow button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pushed.
To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT
arrow button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash
when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. To
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, push and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then push and release the SELECT button until a check-
mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headlamps With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, push and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, push and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system
reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then push and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then push and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, push and release the
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Flashers With Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, the signal lamps activate
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle. To make your selection, push and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has
been deactivated.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) — If
Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, push and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been acti-
vated, or the check-mark is removed showing the system
has been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, push and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirror In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in a
reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward to
allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
To make your selection, push and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated, or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert
(“Blind Spot Alert Lights,” “Blind Spot Alert Lights/
CHM,” and “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spot Alert
feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the
outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM” mode. In this
mode, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when
the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot Alert Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
vated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
To make your selection, push and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature,
showing the system has been activated, or the check-
mark is removed, showing the system has been deacti-
vated.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Calibrate Compass
Press the RIGHT arrow button to calibrate the compass.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass/Temperature Display” in “Electronic
Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for more information.
Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual for de-
tailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 130 Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save time change.
5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and push and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pushing the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse)
button operates in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis-
play.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
in longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle.”
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
Push this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
radio frequency.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save time change.
5. To exit, push any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, push the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, push the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at step 2.
INFO Button
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pushing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
AM/FM Button
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must
be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis-
play.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
in longer disc loading times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more
and the radio will display song titles for each file.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Push any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect® (Satellite)
Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN
button a second time.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for Uconnect® 130/230 radios
only. For Uconnect® 430/430N, 730N, 731N, 735N or 431
touchscreen radio iPod®/USB/MP3 control feature, refer
to the separate Supplement Manual. iPod®/USB/MP3
control is available only if equipped as an option with
these radios.
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart-
ment.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod® or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® / MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
located in the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
where the iPod® or consumer electronic audio device
cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the glove compartment, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
USB Port
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using This Feature
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To enter the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and access a
connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod®/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
USB device and display data:
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or push the VR
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or push the
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
• Jump backward in the current track by pushing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pushing and
holding the FF >> button.
• A single push backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec-
onds.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pushing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or push the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track.⬙
• While a track is playing, push the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pushing the INFO button again jumps to
the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens
have been viewed, the last INFO button push will go
back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
push the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off.⬙
• Push the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 de-
vice scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, push the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pushing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
device, or push the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in
a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device
or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, push the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay
in updating the information on the radio display may
be noticeable.
During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise)
to get to the track faster.
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external
USB device:
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on
the top line and the first item in that list on the second
line.
To exit List mode without selecting a track, push the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level
menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
to be selected and push the TUNE control knob. This
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio
device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex-
treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam-
age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Refer to the Uconnect® Radio Supplement for further
information on Bluetooth® connectivity.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the
radio or push the VR
button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR
button on
the radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next
music track on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR
button
on the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.
Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — IF
EQUIPPED
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES™) is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the overhead console: Unfold the
overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen(s).
• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
Video Entertainment System (VES™)
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Your vehicle may be equipped with either a standard
DVD player or a Blu-ray™ Disc Player. If equipped
with a Blu-ray™ Disc Player, the icon will be present
on the Player.
• Turn on the Player (if equipped on Dual Screen Sys-
tem) by pushing the Power button, located on the far
left, or by pushing the button on the Remote Control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-
ray™ Disc is inserted into the VES™ player, the
screen(s) turn(s) on automatically, the headphone
transmitters turn on and playback begins.
• For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1
(second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control
and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to
the Dual Video Screen section for more information.
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occu-
pants using either the touchscreen radio, the DVD or
Blu-ray™ Disc Player, or by the rear seat occupants
using the remote control.
Blu-ray™ Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc
To view a Blu-ray™ disc, insert the disc into the Blu-
ray™ VES™ disc Player. Playback will begin automati-
cally after the Blu-ray™ is recognized by the disc drive. If
playback does not begin automatically after the disc is
inserted into the Blu-ray™ Player push the play button. If
playback does not begin automatically after the disc is
inserted into Blu-ray™ VES™ disc Player follow these
steps:
Using The Touchscreen Radio
• Push the MENU button on the faceplate, then press the
Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen. If a chapter list
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
appears on the right side of the screen, press the hide
list button on the touchscreen to display the Rear
VES™ control screen.
• Press the 1 button on the touchscreen to select an audio
channel, then press the VES™ Disc button on the
touchscreen in the media column.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Channel 1 for 2nd row screen
and Channel 2 for 3rd row screen), then push the
source key and select VES™ Disc from the menu.
• Push popup/menu key to navigate disc menu and
options.
NOTE:
• Due to the size of the content on a Blu-ray™ Disc, the
disc may not start playing immediately.
• Not all Blu-ray™, CD or DVD discs will automatically
restart from where you left off at when turned off.
Some discs will restart from the beginning, others will
restart from where you left off at, and some will ask
you if you would like to continue or start from the
beginning.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks or HDMI port, located on the left side behind
the second row seat.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
tion®3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES™
AUX 1, by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right but-
tons or by repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then
push ENTER on the Remote Control.
RCA/HDMI/USB Inputs
1 — HDMI Port 4 — USB Ports (Charge Only)
2 — Audio/Video In 5 — Power Inverter
3 — Power Outlet
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Select VES™ AUX1 Mode On The VES™ Screen
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the 1 button on the touchscreen and then press
either AUX 1 or AUX 2 in the VES™ column (depend-
ing which AUX input is used). To exit press the back
arrow button at the top of the touchscreen.
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either push Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
source appears on the screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES™
Column
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES™ Screen
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, press the 2 button on
the touchscreen and choose an audio source. To exit
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen at the
top left of the left screen.
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES™).
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
NOTE: Headunit DVD player does not play Blu-ray™
Discs.
1. Push the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD button on the radio
faceplate (Touchscreen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen-
gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight DISC by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button, then push
ENTER/OK.
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
Select DISC Mode On The VES™ Screen
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the
DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA col-
umn. To exit press the back arrow button at the top left
of the screen.
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio push the RADIO/MEDIA
button on the radio faceplate, then press the DISC tab
button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO
button on the touchscreen.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. If available, the ve-
hicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic trans-
mission. In vehicles with a manual transmission the
parking brake must be engaged.
• Pressing the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func-
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player — If
Equipped
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES™
player automatically selects the appropriate mode
after the disc is recognized and starts playing the
DVD.
NOTE: The VES™ player has basic DVD control func-
tion such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen-
gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Channel 2.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight VES™ DISC
by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
by repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button, then push
ENTER/OK on the Remote Control.
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Select VES™ DISC Mode On The VES™ Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the
DISC button on the touchscreen in the VES™ column.
To exit press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
at the top left of the screen.
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio push the RADIO/MEDIA
button on the radio faceplate, then press the DISC tab
button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO
button on the touchscreen.
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES™
Column
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. If available, the ve-
hicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic trans-
mission. In vehicles with a manual transmission the
parking brake must be engaged.
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc Using The Blu-ray™ Player
— If Equipped
1. Insert the Blu-ray™ Disc with the label facing up. The
Blu-ray™ Player automatically selects the appropriate
mode after the disc is recognized and starts playing
the Blu-ray™ Disc.
NOTE: The Blu-ray™ Player has basic control functions
such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
2. To watch a Blu-ray™ Disc on Screen 1 for second row
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Head-
phone switch is on Channel 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray™ Disc on Screen 2 for third row
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Head-
phone switch is on Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Blu-ray™ Player
Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight Blu-ray™ by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button, then push
OK on the Remote Control.
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the
VES™ Disc button on the touchscreen in the VES™
column. To exit press the back arrow button at the top
left of the screen.
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray™ Disc on the radio, push the
RADIO/MEDIA button on the radio faceplate, then
press the VES™ Disc tab button on the touchscreen
and then the VIEW VIDEO button on the touchscreen.
• Viewing a Blu-ray™ Disc on the Touchscreen radio
screen is not available in all states/provinces. If avail-
able, the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever
must be in the PARK position for vehicles with an
automatic transmission. In vehicles with a manual
transmission the parking brake must be engaged.
Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
Playing
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on
the same channel. If watching a video on Screen 1
(second row), then Channel 2 could be used for audio. If
watching a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Channel 1
could be used for audio.
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either push Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
source appears on the screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES™ Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES™ button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a channel list is
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Rear VES™ Button On The Touchscreen
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, press the 2 button on
the touchscreen and choose an audio source. To exit
press the back arrow button at the top left of the left
screen.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray™ Discs.
• The DVD Player can play CDs and DVDs.
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and the right side equates to Channel 2.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
source will display on the second row screen or Screen
1 and can be heard on Channel 1.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video
source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2
and can be heard on Channel 2.
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
• The 2nd row screen and 3rd row screen of the Video
Entertainment System can play two separate discs by
utilizing the touchscreen radio DVD player and Blu-
ray™ Disc Player.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
Remote Control
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4.
Channel/Screen Selector Switch – Indicates which chan-
nel is being controlled by the remote control. When the
selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (right
side of the screen). When the selector switch is in the
Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, push to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, push to select to the
previous station. In disc modes, push to advance to the
start of the current or previous audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
7. POP UP/MENU – Push to return to the main menu of
a DVD disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the
Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
RANDOM for a CD).
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play
10. PROG Up/Down / Rewind/skip back and fast fwd/
skip forward – When listening to a radio mode,
pushing PROG Up selects the next preset and push-
ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
the radio. When listening to compress audio on a
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and
PROG Down selects the previous directory. When
listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc
changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG
Down selects the previous disc.
11. MUTE – Push to mute the headphone audio output
for the selected channel.
12. SLOW – If Equipped – Push to slow playback of a
DVD disc. Push play (䉴) to resume normal play.
13. STATUS – If Equipped – Push to display the current
status.
14. MODE/SOURCE – Push to change the mode of the
selected channel. See the Mode Selection section of
this manual for details on changing modes.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, push the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode
is selected and the disc is stopped, push the SETUP
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
Setup Menu of this manual.)
16.
BACK – When navigating in menu mode, push to return
to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs disc
menu, the operation depends on the disc’s contents.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, push to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER/OK – Push to select the highlighted option
in a menu.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, push to select to the next
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control — If Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE – Push to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch – Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan-
nel 1 (second row). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (third row).
5. 䉴 – Push to navigate menus.
6. SETUP – Push to access the Blu-ray™ Setup menu
screen. When a disc is loaded in the Blu-ray™ player
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
(if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected and the
disc is stopped, push the SETUP button to access the
Blu-ray™ Setup menu.
7. 䉴䉴 – Push and release to jump to the next available
audio track or video chapter. Push and hold to fast
forward through the current audio track or video
chapter.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. Four Colored Buttons – Push to access Blu-ray™ Disc
features.
10. POPUP/MENU – Push to access the Blu-ray™ main
menu when in Blu-ray™ or DVD mode. Push to start
Scan or start Random track functions in CD or HDD
modes.
11. KEYPAD – Push to navigate chapters or titles.
12. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
13. 䉳䉳 – Push and release to jump to the previous audio
track or video chapter. Push and hold to fast rewind
through the current audio track or video chapter.
14.
– Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK – Push to exit out of menus or return to source
selection screen.
16. 䉲 – Push to navigate menus.
17. OK – Push to select the highlighted option in a menu.
18. 䉳 – Push to navigate menus.
19. 䉱 – Push to navigate menus.
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compart-
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, push the Video Lock button on the DVD
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s)
indicate when Video Lock is active.
• Pushing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES™.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-
eration. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
VES™ Remote Control Storage
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
VES™ Headphones
1 — Volume Control 3 — Channel Selection Switch
2 — Power Button 4 — Power Indicator
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray™ Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Blu-ray™ VES™ Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
NOTE:
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen.
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi-
gate to the available modes and push the OK button to
select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire-
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer-
able.
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace-
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE-
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU-
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® re-
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR-
RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding
your Unwired® wireless headphones, please
phone 1-888-293-3332 or email
customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT).
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM),
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
long as it is not in shared mode.
When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES™
have control of the video functions. The VES™ has the
ability to control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Information Mode Display Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pushing the remote control’s OK
button activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen
Information Mode Video Screen Display
1 — Channel 1 Mode
2 — Channel 1 Shared Status
3 — Channel 1 Audio Only/
Mute
4 — Channel 2 Mode
5 — Channel 2 Shared Status
6 — Channel 2 Audio Only/
Mute
7 — Channel 1 ENTER/OK
Button Action
8 — Channel 2 ENTER/OK
Button Action
9 — Clock
10 — Video Lock
11 — Not Available / Error
Numeric Keypad Menu
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, satellite
channel, or track number. To enter the desired digit:
1. Push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, 䉴,
䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, push the remote con-
trol’s ENTER/OK button to select the digit. Repeat
these steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pushing the remote
control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list of all
available channels. Navigate this list using the remote
control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired
station, push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button to
tune to that station. To jump through the list more
quickly, navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on
the screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play
and Random play.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga-
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
player.
Disc Menu For CDs
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
1. Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
2. Close the video screen.
3. To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The DVD player is capable of playing the following types
of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter):
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
The Blu-Ray™ Player is capable of the playing the
following types of discs (12 cm diameter):
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions3–6)
profile 3.0
Compressed Video Files (DivX)
The Blu-Ray™ Player is capable of playing DivX files
from a CD disc (usually a CD-R, CD-RW) or a DVD disc
(usually a DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW or DVD+RW).
• The Blu-Ray™ Player always uses the file extension to
determine the video format, so DivX files must always
end with the extension “.div”, “divx” or “.avi.” To
prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions
for any other types of files.
• For DivX files, only DivX Home Theater Profile Ver.3.0
is supported.
• Any file that is copy protected will not play. The
Blu-Ray™ Player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as Xvid and RMP4
will not play. The Blu-Ray™ Player will automatically
skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
• For the lack of indexes DivX files, “Resume Play,”
“Fast Forward” and “Fast Rewind” cannot be sup-
ported.
• DivX Home Theater Profile 3.0 requires:
• Maximum resolution 720 x 480 @ 30fps or 720 x 576
@ 25fps
• Minimum resolution 16 x 16
• Maximum frame rate for progressive source 30
frames per second
• Maximum field rate for interlaced source 60 fields
per second
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• To change the current chapter, use the remote control’s
or Blu-Ray™ Player’s “Fast Forward” button to ad-
vance to the next chapter, or the “Fast Rewind” button
to return to the start of the current or previous chapter.
DVD/Blu-ray™/BD Region Codes
The DVD player/Blu-ray™ Player and many DVD/Blu-
ray™ Discs are coded by geographic region. These region
codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the
region code for the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc does not match
the region code for the player, the disc will stop playing
and a warning will be displayed.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,
the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
Video title is ignored). All multi - channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3, WMA or AAC (Blu-ray™ Disc
Player only) files. The player will also play DVD-Video
content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVD-
ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not sup-
ported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guide-
lines when recording discs.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
Other formats (such as HFS, or others) are not sup-
ported.
• Blu-ray™ Disc Player can extend 2,000 files and 255
folders.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
• Mixed disc which contains ⬙DivX⬙ will be priority
played on Blu-ray™ Disc Player.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the DVD player, check with the disc recording
software publisher for more information about burning
playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 / WMA and ACC)
The DVD/Blu-ray™ Player (if equipped) is capable of
playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Win-
dows Media Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a
CD-R or CD-RW).
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
⬙.WMA.⬙ AAC files must always end with the exten-
sion ⬙aac⬙ or ⬙AAC.⬙ To prevent incorrect playback, do
not use these extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• For Blu-ray™ files, only version 1.0 / 1.1 / 2.2 / 2.3
and 2.4 ID3 tag data (such as artist name, track title,
album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
player will automatically skip the file and begin play-
ing the next available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192 Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192 Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended
sample rate is either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
• To change the current file, use the DVD player’s 䉱
button to advance to the next file, or the 䉲 button to
return to the start of the current or previous file.
• To change the current directory, use the remote con-
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera-
ture is above 120° F (49° C). The Blu-ray™ Player may
shut down when the vehicle’s interior temperature ex-
ceeds 140° F (60° C). When this occurs, the DVD/Blu-
ray™ Player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off
the display until a safe temperature is reached. This
shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD/
Blu-ray™ Player.
The Blu-ray™ player may require additional reading
time during extremely cold weather conditions. When
this occurs, allow the vehicles interior temperature to
warm, then insert disc into player.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
Other Language Setup
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Eng-
lish. These languages are selected using a special four-
digit code.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these
additional instructions:
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but-
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
and then push the remote control ENTER/OK button.
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then push the remote control’s
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but-
tons, select a digit for the current position. After
DVD Player Language Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
selecting the digit, push the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
• When the entire four-digit code is entered, push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the language
code is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙.
If the digits are visible after this step, then the lan-
guage code is valid.
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
language codes, please contact the dealer where the
vehicle was purchased.
Language Code Language Code
Dutch 2311 French 1517
German 1304 Italian 1819
Portuguese 2519 Spanish 1418
Rating And Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to control
the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most DVD-
Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to them
where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and
higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passen-
ger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
follow these additional instructions:
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but-
tons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then push the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the set password screen is displayed.
DVD Password Entry
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the
change.
DVD Player Level Menu
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
follow these additional instructions:
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then push the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set
the value for the current digit, and then push the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons, select the new rating level, and then push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the
change.
Product Agreement
Software
This product contains software licensed under GNU
General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General
Public License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acqui-
sition, modification, and distribution of the source code
of the GPL/LGPL software. You may download Source
Code from the following website at no charge.
http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/MP_632_34W821
The website provides the Source Code ⬙As Is⬙ and
without warranty of any kind. By downloading Source
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associ-
ated with downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that accompany
each Source Code. Please note that we cannot respond to
any inquiries regarding the source code.
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PER-
SONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CON-
SUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE AVC STANDARD (⬙AVC VIDEO⬙)
AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PER-
SONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PRO-
VIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PER-
SONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CON-
SUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (⬙VC-1 VIDEO⬙)
AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PER-
SONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PRO-
VIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
Patents
Cinavia Notice
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of
unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohib-
ited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message
will be displayed and playback or copying will be
interrupted. More information about Cinavia technology
is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information
Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional
information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with
your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
This product incorporates proprietary technology under
license from Verance Corporation and is protected by
U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued and pending as well as copyright and
trade secret protection for certain aspects of such tech-
nology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation.
Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. All rights
reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
• This product incorporates copyright protection tech-
nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright pro-
tection technology must be authorized by Macrovi-
sion, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
• Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,
Symbol and DTS 2.0 Channel are trademarks of DTS,
Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format
created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation.
This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX
video. Visit divx.com for more information and software
tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certi-
fied® device must be registered in order to play pur-
chased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain
your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in
your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more
information on how to complete your registration.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trade-
marks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are
used under license.
Trademark
• Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™ and the logos are trademarks
of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its
affiliates.
CAUTION!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
The right-hand rocker switch has a push-button in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pushing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a push-button in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op-
eration in each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pushing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset push-button.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
If Equipped
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
conditions.
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each
front seat occupant can independently control the Heat-
ing, Ventilation and Air Conditioning operations coming
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
When the front control is in any position other than rear,
the front control operates all the rear functions.
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera-
tion. Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the
front control is in the Panel mode. When the front unit is
in Bi-Level mode, airflow will be emitted from both the
upper and lower rear outlets. When the front control is in
Floor, Defrost, or Mix modes, airflow will be directed out
of the rear floor outlets.
Manual Temperature Control
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent tem-
perature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
2. Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the rear system in any mode you select. The rear
blower speed increases as you move the control to the
right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower
speeds. To allow the rear overhead control, turn blower
knob fully to the left, past The ⬙O⬙ off position into the
“REAR” control position.
3. Front Blower Control
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds.
4. Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left
for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the
rear cabin.
5. Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
warmer temperature settings.
6. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
7. Front Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor may operate in
Mix and Defrost, even if the A/C button is not pushed.
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To
improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
necessary.
8. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
Push this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes.
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pushing the rear window defroster switch a
second time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
9. Recirculation Control Button
Push this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
vehicle. An indicator light will illuminate when
you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the
Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside
odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE:
• If the Recirculation button is pushed when the
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
indicator will flash three times to indicate Recircula-
tion mode is not allowed.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
• In order to prevent fogging, when the Recirculation
button is pushed and the mode control is set to
Panel, the A/C will engage automatically.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
10. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Push and release to change the current setting.
The indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
11. Floor Mode Button
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side win-
dow demist outlets.
12. Bi-Level Mode Button
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
13. Panel Mode Button
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted for
direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
Max A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and Recirculation
mode buttons at the same time.
Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 — Rear Blower 3 — Rear Mode
2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear Climate Control Lock
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the
REAR position do the second row seat occupants have
control of the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
The rear mode selection REAR, allows the settings to be
controlled by the rear mode control knob.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and
the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable.
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
blower operation will be set automatically.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the
cabin, if desired.
The Three-Zone ATC system automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all
passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air
temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside air
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains a
comfortable temperature, even under changing condi-
tions.
1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
2. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the left
front seat occupant.
4. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel,
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
Front ATC Panel
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Rear Temperature Control Display
This display shows the current Rear Temperature Control
settings.
6. Front Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode.
7. Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Auto mode.
8. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
front seat occupant.
9. Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indica-
tor illuminates when ON. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The blower
will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected.
10. Passenger Temperature Control Up/Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or
the lower button for cooler temperature settings.
11. Rear Control Button
Provides toggle operation between front control screen
and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the
rear climate control screen and allow the front seat
occupants control over the rear climate settings.
12. Rear Window Defrost
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 10 minutes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
13. Rear Lock
Push and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC
panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls.
14. Auto Temperature Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Push and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
15. Climate Control OFF Button
Push and release to turn the Climate Control OFF. If the
control is OFF, push any button to turn the control ON.
16. Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed in-
creases as you move the control to the right from the
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
17. Mode Control Button
Push and release to select between Modes (Panel, Bi-
Level, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
18. Recirculation Control Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
19. SYNC Button
Push and release to control the temperature setting for all
three zones from the driver temperature control.
20. Driver Temperature Control Up/Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the
lower button for cooler temperature settings.
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active
to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not
automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on
the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
Recirculation
Recirculation Control Button
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. An indicator
light will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode.
Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out
any outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior
rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid
weather.
NOTE:
• If the Recirculation button is pressed when the system
is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will
flash three times to indicate Recirculation mode is not
allowed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
• To prevent fogging, when the Recirculation button is
pushed and the mode control is set to Panel, the A/C
will engage automatically.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC
display, along with two temperatures for the driver
and front passenger. The system will then automati-
cally regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger,
and rear temperatures. Once the desired temperature
is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
Programmable Features” in this Section.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by chang-
ing the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Push ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, push ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
1. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection.
2. Rear Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear
seat occupants.
3. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the
right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC
panel located on the instrument panel.
Pushing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display.
The rear temperature and air source are controlled from
the front ATC panel.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
1. Push the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock
icon in the rear temperature knob.
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed 3 — Rear Mode
2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear Temperature Lock
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
Programmable Features” in this Section.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the right side trim
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
front ATC panel.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
ignored.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
Rear Mode Control
• Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
Operating Tips Chart
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................433
▫ Automatic Transmission ................433
▫ Normal Starting.......................433
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
−29°C) .............................434
▫ If The Engine Fails To Start ..............434
▫ After Starting ........................435
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .436
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............436
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............438
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .438
▫ Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode .............438
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission .........439
▫ Gear Ranges .........................440
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........448
▫ Acceleration .........................448
▫ Traction ............................448
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............449
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................449
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................449
5
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................451
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............452
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................452
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................455
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .455
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............455
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............458
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............459
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........460
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............463
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................464
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............468
▫ Tire Markings ........................468
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........472
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........473
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........475
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........480
▫ Tire Pressure ........................480
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................481
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .483
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................483
▫ Tire Types ...........................484
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............486
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............486
▫ Tire Spinning ........................489
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................489
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Life Of Tire .........................490
▫ Replacement Tires .....................491
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......492
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....493
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .494
▫ Base System .........................497
▫ Premium System — If Equipped ...........500
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................503
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................503
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................504
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............504
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......505
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................506
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................506
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................507
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............508
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED ...........508
▫ E-85 General Information ...............508
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................509
▫ Fuel Requirements ....................509
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .............510
▫ Starting ............................510
▫ Cruising Range .......................511
▫ Replacement Parts ....................511
▫ Maintenance .........................511
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................511
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............511
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............513
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................514
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............514
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................517
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............517
▫ Towing Tips .........................528
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................529
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .529
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models .........530
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN Mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting
1. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release it as
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running.
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure
(Steps 1–3 above).
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If The Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, DO NOT crank the
engine for more than 15 second intervals at one time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is
running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15–
second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, the transmission is locked in PARK, secur-
ing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go ™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can only be
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehi-
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi-
tions. Press the “econ” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the
ECON mode is engaged.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to
allow the engine to operate at lower speeds.
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower
engine speeds and remain on longer.
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more conser-
vative.
• Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual down-
shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information). Mov-
ing the shift lever to the left or right (–/+) while in the
DRIVE position will select the highest available transmis-
sion gear, and will display that gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Shift Lever
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade, and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key re-
moval) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children) and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold tempera-
tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu-
minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the
transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you shift the
transmission into 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will
not shift above fourth gear (except to prevent engine
overspeed), but will shift through the lower gears nor-
mally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that
gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top
available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply hold the shift lever to the right
(+) until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Gear Position
Display
123456D
Actual Gear(s) Allowed 1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present:
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control,
when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demon-
strate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of
Overdrive.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
(Continued)
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/ RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and
Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems complement the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
braking capability during emergency braking maneu-
vers.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You may experience the following when the brake system
goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisti-
cated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed, or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent colli-
sions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moni-
tors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide en-
hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions simi-
lar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if the ESC is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light
flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions,
and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
WARNING!
• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded.
(Continued)
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-
planing.
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency brak-
ing maneuvers. The system detects an emergency brak-
ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances direc-
tional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents re-
sulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropri-
ate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on
two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off”
mode, ESC will operate without engine torque manage-
ment. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in
deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel
spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.
WARNING!
• When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the ⴖESC Off Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated.
When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
WARNING! (Continued)
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop
all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this sec-
tion for further information. When TSC is functioning,
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90
seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times
within 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two
times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
pleted properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another ve-
hicle or object. Always remember to use the park-
ing brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the touch-
screen radio. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear
and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when replacement
is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator.”
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your
tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire
Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information
section of this manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• Due to limited clearance, a 225/65R17 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure require-
ments found on the tire placard label located on the
driver’s-side B-Pillar.
Tire Rotation
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
to be turned off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressures have been received.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard
pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi
(207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This
tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approxi-
mately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Us-
ing aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized service center to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will display
in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime
will be activated when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure value
(located on the placard label on the driver’s-side B-Pillar).
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressures have been received.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
• The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn on.
• After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) for the TPMS to receive
this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Premium System — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
• Receiver Module
• Four TPMS Sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics
displaying tire pressures
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
“LOW TIRE” message and a graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing. An ⬙Inflate
Tire to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will automatically update, the graphic dis-
play of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with --in
place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS
Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following scenarios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message is then followed by a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
• The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on, the
“LOW TIRE” message will be displayed, a chime will
sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing
pressure value and the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message in
the graphic display.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire
pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States MRXMERCTX1
Canada 2546A-MERCTX1
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these en-
gines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol.
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. Please refer to the other sec-
tions of this manual for information on features that are
common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible Fuel
powered vehicles.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 Liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. It is recommended that
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
FCA US LLC engines.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/Kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by about 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on,
due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
Fuel Filler Cap
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys-
tem” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
is 10% to 15% for a conventional hitch. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Weight Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
Max. Tongue Weight
3.6L/Automatic 8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,600 lbs
(1 633 kg)*
360 lbs (163 kg)
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 3,350 lbs
(1 519 kg)*
335 lbs (152 kg)
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1 360 kg)*
300 lbs (136 kg)
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a
lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground All Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Recreational Towing — All Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis-
sion in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........533
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............533
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................534
▫ Torque Specifications ..................534
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................536
▫ Jack Location ........................536
▫ Spare Tire Removal ....................537
▫ To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut.......538
▫ Spare Tire Tools .......................540
▫ Spare Tire Removal Instructions ...........541
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................543
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................544
▫ Securing The Compact Spare Tire ..........551
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................553
䡵 JUMP-STARTING ......................555
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............556
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................557
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire
drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at
the front of the floor console or under front super console
forward bin liner.
Jack And Tool Location
Spare Tire Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the
spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following
center console configurations.
Super Console
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare
tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the
console.
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor
console to gain clear access of the tire winch drive nut.
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compart-
ment.
3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compart-
ment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.
Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console
Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to
access the winch drive nut.
Drive Nut Access
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
Spare Tire Tools
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as-
sembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/
cover assembly.
Assembled T-handle
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the
center console area.
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place
the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
Spare Tire And Cover
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in
the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from
underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a
spare tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under
the vehicle.
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
cover assembly from under the vehicle.
Pulling Spare Tire
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the
wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs
together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to
release it from the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
Removing Wheel Spacer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that compact spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, compact spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires – General Information” for information about the
compact spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill
flange of the vehicle body.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Jack Locations
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
Rear Jacking Locations
Rear Jack Engaged
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and is located 6 in (150 mm) from door edge.
NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be
placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle.
Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under
the vehicle.
Front Jack Locations
Front Jack Engaged
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5.
Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the compact spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the compact spare tire is mounted incor-
rectly.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug nut torque.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
10.
Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire cover
assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the compact spare tire location. Have
the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as
possible.
Mounting Compact Spare Tire
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to
form a “T” and fit the winch T-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the right until the winch
mechanism clicks at least three times.
NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for in-
structions on assembling the T-handle.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
back in the stowage compartment.
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
Securing The Compact Spare Tire
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a
T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mecha-
nism stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack
in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out
from under the vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the com-
pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under
the vehicle.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the compact spare
tire/cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through
the center of the wheel and compact spare tire/cover
assembly, so that the two retainer tabs snap out and
engage the compact spare tire cover on the opposite
side.
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and compact spare tire/cover assembly.
Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could
result in loss of the compact spare tire and cover
assembly, which will cause vehicle damage and may
cause loss of vehicle control and serious personal
injury.
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned cor-
rectly against the underside of the vehicle.
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size deflated tire, or any
other full-size tire, as the tire may not be held
securely. Vehicle damage may result.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug nut torque.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover (located near the top
right of the shift lever in the instrument panel).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
Wheel lift Rear
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed
equipment is not available, and the transmission is
operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
CAUTION!
• Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........567
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .568
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............568
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................569
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................571
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................571
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........571
▫ Engine Oil ..........................572
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................575
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................575
▫ Exhaust System ......................576
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............578
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............579
▫ Body Lubrication .....................582
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............582
▫ Cooling System ......................583
▫ Brake System ........................589
▫ Automatic Transmission ................591
7
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................593
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . .601
䡵 FUSES ..............................601
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . .602
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................610
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS ..................611
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................613
▫ Headlamps .........................613
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps ............613
▫ Fog Lamps ..........................614
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Backup Lamps .......................614
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .615
▫ License Lamp ........................615
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................616
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................617
▫ Engine .............................617
▫ Chassis ............................619
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Air Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Battery 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight-
ened.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
•
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR® All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
WARNING! (Continued)
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) only by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
(Continued)
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-
mission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans-
mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Surfaces
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equiva-
lent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
CAUTION!
• Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
• Do not use power washers to clean the inside of the
vehicle, plastic parts can be permanently damaged
and the amount of water can cause problems with
the electrical components of your vehicle.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
at one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the appli-
cable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A
label that identifies each component may be printed or
embossed on the inside of the cover.
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power Mod-
ule cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
Totally Integrated Power Module
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
J1 40 Amp Green – Power Folding Seat
J2 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
J3 30 Amp Pink – Rear Door Module
J4 25 Amp Clear – Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp Clear – Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control
System
J7 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability Control
System
J8 40 Amp Green – Power Memory Seat – If Equipped
J9 40 Amp Green – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle Motor/Flex
Fuel – If Equipped
J10 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Wash/Manifold Tuning Valve –
If Equipped
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
J11 30 Amp Pink – Power Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft
Module – If Equipped
J12 30 Amp Pink – HVAC Rear Blower, Radiator Fan Motor
J13 60 Amp Yellow – Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
J14 40 Amp Green – Rear Window Defogger
J15 40 Amp Green – Front Blower
J17 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Module Trans Range
J19 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper LO/HI
J21 20 Amp Blue – Front/Rear Washer
J22 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Module
M1 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch
M2 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Fog Lamps
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
M3 – 20 Amp Yellow Front/Rear Axle Locker, Vacuum Pump
Motor
M4 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Tow
M5 – 25 Amp Clear Inverter
M6 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor, Cigar
Lighter (Instrument Panel or with Console
Rear)
M7 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) –
Center Seat or with Console Rear
M8 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat – If Equipped
M9 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped
M10 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw — Video System, Satel-
lite Radio, DVD, Hands-Free Module, Uni-
versal Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp,
Streaming Video Module – If Equipped
M11 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control System
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
M12 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/Radio
M13 – 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Cluster, SIREN, Clock Module,
Multi-Function Control Switch – If
Equipped
M14 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – If Equipped
M15 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear View Mirror, Instrument Cluster,
Multi-Function Control Switch, Tire Pres-
sure Monitor, Glow Plug Module – If
Equipped
M16 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module/Occupant Classification
Module
M17 – 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp, Running
Lamps
M18 – 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
M19 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
M20 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch
Bank, Steering Column Module, Switch
Steering Wheel
M21 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
M22 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M23 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M24 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Wiper
M25 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – If
Equipped
M26 – 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Switch, Driver Window
Switch
M27 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module, Keyless Entry
Module
M28 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain, Transmission Control Module
M29 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
M30 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Wiper Module, Power Folding Mirror
M31 – 20 Amp Yellow Back-Up Lamps
M32 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module, THATCHUM – If
Equipped
M33 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
M34 – 10 Amp Red
Park Assist, Heater Climate Control Mod-
ule, Headlamp Wash, Compass, Rear Cam-
era, Door Lamps, Flashlight, Relay Diesel
Cabin Heater, Rad Fan Diesel – If Equipped
M35 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
M36 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #3 (Instrument Panel or with
Console Center)
M37 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes, Stability Control, Stop
Lamp, Fuel Pump
M38 – 25 Amp Clear Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/
Unlock Motors
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit
breaker located in the Totally Integrated Power Module.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may do the following:
• Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in the Totally Integrated
Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw
(IOD).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp 578
Center & Rear Reading Lamps 578
Front Door Courtesy Lamp 578
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped 578
Instrument Cluster Lamps PC74
Liftgate Lamp(s) 578
Overhead Console Reading Lamps PC579
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped 194
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamp H11LL
Fog Lamp – If Equipped PSX24W
Front Side Marker, Park/Turn Signal 3757A or PY27/7W
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp 3157
License 168
NOTE: All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or
glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not
approved and should not be used for replacement.
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
2. Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector, then
depress the tab and remove the connector from the
bulb.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the
headlamp housing.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked
into the headlamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red
lock tab forward.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
Fog Lamps
NOTE:
Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of the
fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the push
pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam.
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, squeeze the two tabs on the side of the
bulb socket and pull straight out from the fog lamp.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
lamp until it locks into place.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or
similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side
to disengage the two ball studs.
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
dislodging them separately.
3. Twist the socket and remove from the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly.
See your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
bar and above the license plate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and
pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.
2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into
place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 20 Gallons 76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20,
API Certified).
6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent) meet-
ing the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS.90032.
13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and
Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use Only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Fail-
ure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission. We recommend
MOPAR® ATF+4® Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
622 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 623
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
624 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
XXX X X X X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 625
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
XXX X X X X
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L engine). **
X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
XX
626 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your ve-
hicle for any of the following: po-
lice, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
X
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 627
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
628 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................631
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............631
▫ Prepare A List ........................631
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............631
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............631
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center ...........632
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........632
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................633
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................633
▫ Service Contract ......................633
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............634
䡵 MOPAR®PARTS.......................635
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............635
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................635
▫ In Canada...........................635
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............636
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 631
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 633
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
634 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 635
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
636 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 637
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
638 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ........................455
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............586
Adding Fuel .............................511
Adding Washer Fluid ......................583
Additives, Fuel ...........................506
Adjustable Pedals .........................208
Airbag...............................76, 77
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag .................77, 78
Air Bag Components .....................76
Air bag Operation .......................79
Air Bag Warning Light ....................88
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................81
Enhanced Accident Response ................87
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................90
FrontAirBag ........................76, 77
If A Deployment Occurs ...................86
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................80
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............89
Side Air Bags ...........................81
Air bag Deployment ........................76
Air bag Light ......................88, 104, 285
Air bag Maintenance........................89
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .575
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................579
Air Conditioning..........................408
Air Conditioning Controls ...................408
Air Conditioning Filter ..................427, 580
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............426
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone ..............413, 423
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............579, 580
Air Conditioning System .............408, 415, 579
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control..........408
Air Pressure, Tires.........................481
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio.....................347
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............585, 616
640 INDEX
Disposal ..............................587
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................285
Appearance Care .........................593
Ashtray ................................250
Assistance Towing.........................136
Assist, Hill Start ..........................464
Auto Down Power Windows ..................45
Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................116
Automatic Door Locks ......................37
Automatic Headlights ......................197
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........415
Automatic Transmission ..............436, 591, 593
Adding Fluid .......................592, 593
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................593
Fluid Change ..........................593
Fluid Level Check .......................592
Fluid Type .........................591, 619
Gear Ranges ...........................440
Special Additives .......................592
Torque Converter .......................447
Auto Up Power Windows ....................45
Battery.................................578
Jump Starting ..........................555
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........27
Saving Feature (Protection) ................201
Belts, Seat...............................104
Body Builders Guide ........................6
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................582
B-Pillar Location ..........................475
Brake Assist System .......................459
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............455
Brake Fluid .............................619
Brake System .........................455, 589
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................455
Fluid Check ...........................590
Parking ..............................452
Brake/T
ransmission Interlock.................438
10
INDEX 641
Bulb Replacement .........................613
Bulbs, Light ..........................106, 611
Calibration, Compass ......................315
Camera, Rear ............................223
Capacities, Fluid ..........................616
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................511
Power Steering .........................452
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................587
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............103, 508
Cargo Area Features .......................265
Cargo Compartment .......................265
Luggage Carrier ........................268
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ....................257
Car Washes .............................594
Cellular Phone ........................121, 407
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............615
Certification Label.........................514
Chains, Tire .............................492
Changing A Flat Tire .......................536
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................469
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ............................285, 569
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............102
Checks, Safety ...........................102
Child Restraint ............................91
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................96
Child Restraints .........................91
Infants And Child Restraints ................94
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........94
Child Safety Locks .........................52
Clean Air Gasoline ........................504
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................596
Climate Control ..........................407
Clock ..............................326, 336
642 INDEX
Coat Hook ..............................257
Coin Holder .............................258
Cold Weather Operation ....................434
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............406
Compact Spare Tire........................487
Compass ...............................315
Compass Calibration .......................315
Compass Variance .........................316
Computer, Trip/Travel......................312
Connector
UCI.................................351
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........351
Conserving Fuel ..........................311
Console ................................258
Console, Floor ...........................258
Console, Overhead ........................225
Console, Removable .......................262
Contract, Service ..........................633
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........587
Cooling System...........................583
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............586
Coolant Capacity .......................616
Coolant Level ......................584, 588
Disposal of Used Coolant .................587
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................584
Inspection ............................588
Points to Remember .....................588
Pressure Cap ..........................587
Radiator Cap ..........................587
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......585, 616, 617
Corrosion Protection .......................593
Cupholders ..........................247, 601
Customer Assistance .......................631
Data Recorder, Event .......................90
Daytime Running Lights ....................199
Dealer Service............................571
Defr
oster, Windshield ......................105
10
INDEX 643
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................203
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................568
Dimmer Control ..........................199
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................592
Oil (Engine) ...........................572
Power Steering .........................452
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................562
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................587
Door Locks
Door Locks ............................34
KeyFob...............................34
Remote ...............................34
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................34
Door Opener, Garage.......................229
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ................................449
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy ......311
DVD Player (Video Entertainment
System™) ......................358, 365, 367
E-85 Fuel ...............................508
Economy (Fuel) Mode ......................438
Electrical Power Outlets.....................241
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................118
Electronic Brake Control System ...............455
Brake Assist System .....................459
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........210
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............460
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......299
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................533
Jacking ...........................536, 544
Jump Starting ..........................555
Overheating ...........................533
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........569
644 INDEX
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................575
Block Heater ..........................436
Break-In Recommendations ................102
Checking Oil Level ......................572
Compartment ..........................567
Compartment Identification ................567
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................584, 617
Cooling ..............................583
Exhaust Gas Caution .................103, 508
Flooded, Starting .......................434
Fuel Requirements ...................503, 616
Oil ...........................572, 616, 617
Oil Selection .......................573, 616
Oil Synthetic ..........................574
Overheating ...........................533
Starting ..............................433
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................574
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................574
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............87
Entry System, Illuminated ....................20
Ethanol ................................504
Event Data Recorder ........................90
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................103, 508
Exhaust System .......................103, 576
Exterior Lights ........................106, 611
Fabric Care..............................598
Filler Location Fuel ........................285
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................575
Air Conditioning ....................427, 580
Engine Oil .........................575, 617
Engine Oil Disposal .....................575
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................533
Turn Signal ..................106, 285, 613, 614
Flash-To-Pass ............................201
10
INDEX 645
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .........................511
Engine Oil ............................510
Fuel Requirements ...................508, 509
Maintenance ...........................511
Replacement Parts .......................511
Starting ..............................510
Flooded Engine Starting ....................434
Floor Console ............................258
Fluid Capacities ..........................616
Fluid Leaks .............................107
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................592
Brake ................................590
Cooling System .........................584
Power Steering .........................452
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........617
Fog Lights ...........................285, 614
Fog Light Service .........................614
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating .............172
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................559
Fuel...................................503
Adding ..............................511
Additives .............................506
Clean Air .............................504
Conserving ............................311
Economy Mode ........................438
Ethanol ..............................504
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..................285, 511
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ....................285
Gasoline ..............................503
Materials Added ........................506
Methanol .............................504
Octane Rating ......................503, 617
Requirements .......................503, 616
Saver Mode ...........................311
Tank Capacity ..........................616
Fuel,
Flexible ............................508
646 INDEX
Fueling.................................511
Fuel Optimizer ...........................311
Fuel Saver ..............................311
Fuses ..............................601, 602
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .........229, 236
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............511,513, 568
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................504
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................503
Conserving ............................311
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................504
Gauges
Tachometer ............................285
Gear Ranges .............................440
Gear Select Lever Override ..................560
General Information.................153, 407, 503
Glass Cleaning ...........................599
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................515, 517
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..............514, 517
Guide, Body Builders ........................6
GVWR .................................514
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) ...............121
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................449
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................533
Headlights
Bulb Replacement .......................613
Cleaning .............................599
Lights On Reminder .....................199
Passing ..............................201
Replacing .............................613
Time Delay ............................198
Washers ..............................197
Head Restraints ..........................168
Heated Mirrors ...........................119
Heater .................................408
10
INDEX 647
Heater, Engine Block .......................436
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .201
Hill Start Assist...........................464
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................520
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ............229
Hood Release ............................195
Hook, Coat..............................257
Ignition .................................14
Key ...............................12, 14
Ignition Key Removal .......................14
Illuminated Entry ..........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................15
Information Center, Vehicle ..................299
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................115
Instrument Cluster .....................283, 285
Instrument Panel and Controls ................282
Instrument Panel Cover .....................598
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............600
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ..............602
Interior Appearance Care....................598
Interior Lights ...........................199
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............203
Introduction ..............................4
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio ............157, 357
Jack Location ............................536
Jack Operation ...........................536
Jump Starting ............................555
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........17
Programming Additional Transmitters .........17
Key-In Reminder ..........................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................38
Keyless Entry System .......................20
648 INDEX
Key, Replacement ..........................16
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................15
Lane Change Assist........................201
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................62
Latches ................................107
Hood ................................195
Lead Free Gasoline ........................503
Leaks, Fluid .............................107
Life of Tires .............................490
Liftgate .................................55
Light Bulbs..............................106
Lights ..............................106, 196
Airbag .........................88, 104, 285
Anti-Lock .............................285
Automatic Headlights ....................197
Back-Up ..............................614
Battery Saver ..........................201
Brake Assist Warning ....................462
Bulb Replacement ....................611,613
Center Mounted Stop ....................615
Daytime Running .......................199
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................199
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .....462
Exterior ..............................106
Fog..............................285, 614
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................533
Headlights ............................613
Headlights On Reminder ..................199
High Beam Indicator .....................285
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............201
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Interior ..............................199
License ..............................615
Lights On Reminder .....................199
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........285
Park ................................613
10
INDEX 649
Passing ..............................201
Reading ..............................226
Rear Servicing .........................614
Rear Tail Lamps ........................614
Service ...........................611,613
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .285
Side Marker ...........................614
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............285
Traction Control ........................462
Turn Signal .....................106, 613, 614
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......285
Loading Vehicle ....................257, 514, 516
Capacities ............................516
Tires ................................475
Load Leveling System ......................268
Locks ..................................34
Door .................................34
Lubrication, Body .........................582
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ...................268
Lug Nuts ...............................534
Maintenance Free Battery....................578
Maintenance Procedures ....................571
Maintenance Schedule ......................622
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .285, 569
Manual, Service ..........................636
Map/Reading Lights .......................226
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............190
Memory Seat .........................118,190
Methanol ...............................504
Mini-Trip Computer .......................312
Mirrors ................................115
Automatic Dimming .....................116
Electric Remote .........................118
Exterior Folding ........................117
Heated ...............................119
Memory ..............................190
Outside ..............................117
650 INDEX
Rearview .............................115
Vanity ...............................121
Mode
Fuel Saver ............................311
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................494
MOPAR® Parts .......................571, 635
MTBE/ETBE ............................504
Multi-Function Control Lever .................200
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................102
Occupant Restraints ........................59
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................503
Odometer...............................285
Oil Change Indicator .......................285
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................285
Oil, Engine ..........................572, 617
Capacity .............................616
Change Interval ........................573
Checking .............................572
Disposal ..............................575
Filter .............................575, 617
Filter Disposal .........................575
Identification Logo ......................573
Materials Added to ......................574
Recommendation ....................573, 616
Synthetic .............................574
Viscosity ..........................574, 616
Oil Filter, Selection ........................575
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................568
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............229
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................115,117
Overhead Console.........................225
Overhead Travel Information Center ............225
Overheating, Engine .......................533
10
INDEX 651
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,636
Paint Care ..............................593
Panic Alarm ..............................25
Parking Brake............................452
ParkSense® System, Rear....................214
Pedals, Adjustable.........................208
Personal Settings..........................317
Pets, Transporting .........................101
Phone, Cellular ...........................121
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) ...............121
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........476
Power
Brakes ...............................455
Door Locks ............................36
Lift Gate ..............................56
Mirrors ..............................118
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........241
Seats ................................160
Sliding Door ...........................48
Steering ...........................451, 452
Sunroof ..............................238
Windows ..............................42
Power Steering Fluid.......................619
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................68
Preparation for Jacking .....................543
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................68
Programmable Electronic Features .............317
Radial Ply Tires ..........................483
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........587
Radio Operation ..........................407
Radio Remote Controls .....................405
Rear Air Conditioning...................413, 423
Rear Camera ............................223
Rear Heater .............................413
Rear ParkSense System .....................214
652 INDEX
Rearview Mirrors .........................115
Rear Window Features .....................267
Reclining Front Seats .......................167
Recorder, Event Data .......................90
Recreational Towing .......................529
Reformulated Gasoline .....................504
Refrigerant ..............................580
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................61
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................20
FCC General Information ..................29
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........17
Programming Additional Transmitters .........17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........405
Remote Starting System......................30
Removable Floor Console ...................262
Replacement Bulbs ........................611
Replacement Keys .........................16
Replacement Parts.........................571
Replacement Tires .........................491
Reporting Safety Defects ....................635
Resetting Oil Change Indicator................285
Restraint, Head...........................168
Restraints, Child...........................91
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .................559
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) ...................268
Rotation, Tires ...........................493
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................104
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................106
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................635
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................103
Safety Information, Tire .....................468
Safety Tips ..............................102
Satellite Radio Antenna .....................347
Schedule, Maintenance .....................622
Seat Belt
Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode .......71
Energy Management Feature ................69
10
INDEX 653
Engage The Automatic Locking Mode .........71
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................65
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................62
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............67
Pregnant Women ........................68
Seat Belt Extender .......................67
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................68
Seat Belt Reminder .......................61
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................600
Seat Belt Reminder .........................61
Seat Belts ............................61, 104
Child Restraint ..........................91
Extender ..............................67
Front Seat ........................61, 62, 65
Inspection ............................104
Operating Instructions ....................65
Pregnant Women ........................68
Pretensioners ...........................68
Rear Seat ..............................62
Untwisting Procedure .....................67
Seats ..................................159
Adjustment ........................159, 166
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘nGo).................172
Memory ..............................190
Power ...............................160
Reclining .............................167
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) .................172
Security Alarm ............................17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)...............617
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................17
Key Programming .......................17
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................15
Sentry Key Replacement .....................16
Service Assistance .........................631
Service Contract ..........................633
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .285
Service Manuals ..........................636
654 INDEX
Settings, Personal .........................317
Setting the Clock ......................326, 336
Shift Lever Override .......................560
Shoulder Belts ............................62
Signals, Turn ...............106, 200, 285, 613, 614
Sliding Door .............................47
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................492
Snow Tires ..............................485
Spare Tire ........................487, 488, 537
Spark Plugs .............................617
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................210
Starting ................................433
Automatic Transmission ..................433
Cold Weather ..........................434
Engine Fails to Start .....................434
Remote ...............................30
Starting and Operating .....................433
Starting Procedures ........................433
Steering
Power ............................451, 452
Tilt Column ...........................206
Wheel, Heated .........................207
Wheel, Tilt ............................206
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............405
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .405
Storage ................................610
Storage Bin..............................251
Storage, Vehicle .......................427, 610
Storing Your Vehicle .......................610
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats...............172
Sunglasses Storage ........................226
Sun Roof ...............................238
Sway Control, Trailer.......................463
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................574
System, Remote Starting .....................30
10
INDEX 655
Tachometer..............................285
Telescoping Steering Column .................206
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........415
Tilt Steering Column .......................206
Tire and Loading Information Placard .......475, 476
Tire Markings ............................468
Tires............................106, 480, 637
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................490
Air Pressure ...........................480
Chains ...............................492
Changing .............................536
Compact Spare .........................487
General Information .....................480
High Speed ...........................483
Inflation Pressures .......................481
Jacking ...........................536, 544
Life of Tires ...........................490
Load Capacity ......................475, 477
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............494
Pressure Warning Light ...................285
Quality Grading ........................637
Radial ...............................483
Replacement ...........................491
Rotation ..............................493
Safety ............................468, 480
Sizes ................................469
Snow Tires ............................485
Spare Tire .............................537
Spinning .............................489
Trailer Towing .........................525
Tread Wear Indicators ....................489
Tire Safety Information .....................468
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................522
Torque Converter Clutch ....................447
Towing ................................517
24-Hour
Towing Assistance ................136
Disabled Vehicle ........................562
Guide ...............................521
656 INDEX
Recreational ...........................529
Weight ...............................521
Towing Assistance.........................136
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome ...........529
Traction ................................448
Traction Control ..........................458
Traction Control Switch .....................458
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................463
Trailer Towing ...........................517
Cooling System Tips .....................528
Hitches ..............................520
Minimum Requirements ..................523
Tips.................................528
Trailer and Tongue Weight .................522
Wiring ...............................526
Trailer Towing Guide.......................521
Trailer Weight............................521
Transmission ............................591
Automatic .........................436, 591
Fluid .............................591, 619
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .229
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........20
Transporting Pets .........................101
Tread Wear Indicators ......................489
Trip Odometer ...........................285
Turn Signals ......................285, 613, 614
UCI Connector ...........................351
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity ..............139
Operation .............................123
Phone Call Features .....................131
Phone Features .........................135
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone ...............................141
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode ........333
10
INDEX 657
Operating Instructions CD Mode ............328
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ..........325
Playing MP3 Files .......................331
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Multimedia Satellite Radio .................346
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ..........334
Playing MP3 Files .......................342
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) ...............121
Umbrella Holder..........................253
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................637
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .351
Universal Transmitter ......................229
Unleaded Gasoline ........................503
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................67
Upholstery Care ..........................598
Vanity Mirrors ...........................121
Variance, Compass ........................316
Vehicle Certification Label ...................514
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ....................477, 514, 516
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Storage........................427, 610
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................574
Voice Command
Commands ............................155
System Operation .......................153
Voice Training .........................159
Voice Recognition System (VR)................153
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................533
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .285
Warnings and Cautions.......................6
Warranty Information ......................634
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................583
Washing Vehicle ..........................594
658 INDEX
Water
Driving Through ........................449
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................596
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................596
Wind Buffeting ........................47, 240
Window Fogging .........................427
Windows ................................42
Power ................................42
Rear Vent ..............................42
Windshield Defroster.......................105
Windshield Washers ....................202, 583
Windshield Wiper Blades....................582
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................582
Wipers, Intermittent ....................202, 203
Zone Control (Temperature Control) ............408
10
INDEX 659
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Cargo Van
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Cargo Van
15MZZ-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
